1 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 \# Copyright 1996-2012 The NASM Authors - All Rights Reserved
4 \# See the file AUTHORS included with the NASM distribution for
5 \# the specific copyright holders.
7 \# Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
8 \# modification, are permitted provided that the following
11 \# * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
12 \# notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
13 \# * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
14 \# copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
15 \# disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
16 \# with the distribution.
18 \# THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
19 \# CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
20 \# INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
21 \# MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
22 \# DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
23 \# CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
24 \# SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
25 \# NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
26 \# LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
27 \# HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
28 \# CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
29 \# OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
30 \# EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
32 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
34 \# Source code to NASM documentation
36 \M{category}{Programming}
37 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
39 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
40 \M{copyright_tail}{-- All Rights Reserved}
41 \M{license}{This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "LICENSE" distributed in the NASM archive.}
42 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
45 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
46 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
53 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
54 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
55 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
56 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
57 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
58 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
79 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
80 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
81 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
84 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
85 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
87 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
89 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
91 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
93 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
95 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
96 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
97 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
99 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
100 \IR{>} \c{>} operator
101 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
102 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
103 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
104 \IR{^} \c{^} operator
105 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
106 \IR{|} \c{|} operator
107 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
108 \IR{~} \c{~} operator
109 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
111 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
112 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
113 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
114 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
115 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
116 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
117 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
118 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
119 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
120 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
122 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
123 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
124 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
125 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
127 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
128 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
129 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
130 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
131 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
132 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
133 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
135 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
136 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
137 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
138 \IA{command line}{command-line}
139 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
140 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
141 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
142 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
143 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
144 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
146 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
147 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
148 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
149 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
152 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
153 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
155 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
156 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
157 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
158 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
160 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
161 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
164 \IR{elfx32} \c{elfx32}
165 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
166 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
167 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
168 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
169 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
171 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
172 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
173 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
175 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
176 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
177 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
179 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
180 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
181 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
182 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
183 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
184 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
185 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
186 \IR{logical and} logical AND
187 \IR{logical or} logical OR
188 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
189 \IR{mach object file format} Mach, object file format
191 \IR{macho32} \c{macho32}
192 \IR{macho64} \c{macho64}
195 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
197 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
198 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
199 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
200 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
201 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
202 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
204 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
205 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
207 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
211 \IR{operating system} operating system
213 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
214 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
219 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
220 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
221 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
222 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
223 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
224 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
225 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
226 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
228 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
229 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
230 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
231 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
232 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
233 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
234 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
235 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
236 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
237 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
238 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
239 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
240 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
242 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
243 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
244 \IA{sectalign}{sectalign}
245 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
246 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
247 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
248 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
249 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
251 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
257 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
258 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
259 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
260 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
261 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
262 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
263 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
265 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
266 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
267 \IR{www page} WWW page
271 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
272 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
273 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
274 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
275 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
276 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
277 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
280 \C{intro} Introduction
282 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
284 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
285 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
286 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
287 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
288 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
289 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
290 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
291 strong support for macros.
294 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
296 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
297 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
298 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
299 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
301 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
302 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
304 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
305 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
306 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
307 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
308 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
311 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
312 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
314 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
317 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
318 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
319 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
320 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
321 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
323 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
324 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
325 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
326 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
327 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
328 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
332 \S{legal} \i{License} Conditions
334 Please see the file \c{LICENSE}, supplied as part of any NASM
335 distribution archive, for the license conditions under which you may
336 use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called 2-clause BSD license, also
337 known as the simplified BSD license.
339 Copyright 1996-2011 the NASM Authors - All rights reserved.
341 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
342 modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
345 \b Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
346 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
348 \b Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
349 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
350 documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
352 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
353 CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
354 INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
355 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
356 DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
357 CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
358 SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
359 NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
360 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
361 HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
362 CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
363 OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
364 EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
367 \H{contact} Contact Information
369 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
370 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
371 (see below for the link).
372 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
374 NASM has a \i{website} at
375 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}. If it's not there,
378 \i{New releases}, \i{release candidates}, and \I{snapshots, daily
379 development}\i{daily development snapshots} of NASM are available from
380 the official web site.
382 Announcements are posted to
383 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
385 \W{http://www.freshmeat.net/}\c{http://www.freshmeat.net/}.
387 If you want information about the current development status, please
388 subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list; see link from the
392 \H{install} Installation
394 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
396 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
397 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
398 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
399 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
401 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
402 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
403 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
406 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
407 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
408 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
409 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
410 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
411 under other versions of Windows as well.)
413 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
414 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
415 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
416 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
418 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
419 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
420 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
421 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
424 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
425 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
426 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
427 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
428 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
429 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
430 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
431 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
434 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
436 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
437 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
438 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
439 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
440 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
442 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
443 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
444 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
445 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
448 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
449 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
450 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
451 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
452 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
453 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
454 install the programs yourself.
456 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
457 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
458 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
459 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
462 \C{running} Running NASM
464 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
466 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
468 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
472 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
474 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
476 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
478 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
480 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
481 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
482 to give a listing file name, for example:
484 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
486 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
490 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
493 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
498 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
499 installed it). If it says something like
501 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
503 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
504 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
506 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
508 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
509 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
510 and are rare these days.)
512 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
513 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
517 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
519 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
520 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
521 For Microsoft object file formats (\c{obj}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}),
522 it will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
523 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
524 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\c{aout}, \c{as86},
525 \c{coff}, \c{elf32}, \c{elf64}, \c{elfx32}, \c{ieee}, \c{macho32} and
526 \c{macho64}) it will substitute \c{.o}. For \c{dbg}, \c{rdf}, \c{ith}
527 and \c{srec}, it will use \c{.dbg}, \c{.rdf}, \c{.ith} and \c{.srec},
528 respectively, and for the \c{bin} format it will simply remove the
529 extension, so that \c{myfile.asm} produces the output file \c{myfile}.
531 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
532 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
533 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
535 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
536 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
537 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
538 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
539 an intervening space. For example:
541 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
542 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
544 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
545 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
548 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
550 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
551 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
552 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
553 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
554 choose what you want the default to be.
556 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
557 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
559 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
560 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
563 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
565 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
566 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
567 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
568 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
569 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
570 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
573 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
575 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
576 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
577 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
578 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
579 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
582 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
584 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
585 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
587 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
590 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
592 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
593 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
594 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
595 dependency list without a prefix.
598 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
600 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
601 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
603 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
606 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
608 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
609 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
610 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
611 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
612 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
614 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
617 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
619 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
620 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
621 specified by the \c{-o} option.
624 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
626 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
627 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
628 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
632 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
634 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
635 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
636 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
637 file has been removed.
640 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
642 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
643 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
644 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
645 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
646 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
647 if \c{-F} is specified.
649 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
650 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
651 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
653 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
654 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
655 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
658 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
660 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
661 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
662 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
663 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
664 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
667 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
669 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
670 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
672 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
673 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
674 the default and looks like this:
676 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
678 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
679 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
680 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
681 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
682 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
684 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
685 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
687 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
689 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
690 instead of being delimited by colons.
692 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
694 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
696 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
697 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
698 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
699 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
700 example) you want to load them into an editor.
702 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
703 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
704 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
705 the errors into a file by typing
707 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
709 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
710 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
711 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
713 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
715 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
716 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
717 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
718 program, you can type:
720 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
722 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
725 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
727 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
728 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
729 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
730 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
731 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
732 library}, for example, by typing
734 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
736 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
739 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
740 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
741 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
742 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
743 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
744 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
746 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
747 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
748 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
750 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
751 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
752 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
755 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
756 be specified as \c{-I}.
759 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
761 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
762 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
765 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
767 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
768 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
770 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
771 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
774 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
776 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
777 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
778 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
781 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
783 as an alternative to placing the directive
787 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
788 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
789 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
790 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
793 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
794 be specified as \c{-D}.
797 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
799 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
800 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
801 option specified earlier on the command lines.
803 For example, the following command line:
805 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
807 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
808 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
811 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
812 be specified as \c{-U}.
815 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
817 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
818 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
819 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
820 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
821 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
822 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
824 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
825 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
826 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
828 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
830 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
832 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
833 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
834 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
836 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
838 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
839 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
840 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
841 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
842 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
843 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
846 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
848 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
849 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
851 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
852 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
853 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
855 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
856 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
857 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
858 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
860 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
861 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
862 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
863 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatibility with earlier
864 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
865 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
867 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses, and is the default
870 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
871 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
874 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} Option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
876 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
877 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
879 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
881 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
882 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
883 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
884 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
885 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
888 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
889 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
890 \c{include}, \c{local})
892 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} and \i\c{-W} Options: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
894 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
895 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
896 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
897 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
898 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
899 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
902 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
903 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
904 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
905 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
906 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
907 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
908 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
910 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
912 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
913 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
914 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
915 you might want to disable it.
917 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
918 warning class is disabled by default.
920 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
921 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
922 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
924 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
925 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
926 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
927 see \k{syntax} for more information.
929 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
930 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
932 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
933 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
934 This warning class is disabled by default.
936 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
939 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
942 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
945 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
948 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
951 \b \i\c{lock} warns about \c{LOCK} prefixes on unlockable instructions.
954 \b \i\c{hle} warns about invalid use of the HLE \c{XACQUIRE} or \c{XRELEASE}
958 \b \i\c{error} causes warnings to be treated as errors. Disabled by
961 \b \i\c{all} is an alias for \e{all} suppressible warning classes (not
962 including \c{error}). Thus, \c{-w+all} enables all available warnings.
964 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
965 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
966 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
967 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
968 (without the brackets) exists.
970 Since version 2.00, NASM has also supported the gcc-like syntax
971 \c{-Wwarning} and \c{-Wno-warning} instead of \c{-w+warning} and
972 \c{-w-warning}, respectively.
975 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
977 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
978 and the date on which it was compiled.
980 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
982 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
984 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
985 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
986 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
990 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
991 \c ('*' denotes default):
992 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
993 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
996 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
998 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
999 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
1000 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
1001 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
1002 (but not always) likes it.
1005 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
1007 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
1008 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
1009 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
1010 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
1011 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
1013 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
1014 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib\\} will be treated as two separate options.
1015 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
1016 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
1017 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
1018 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
1020 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
1021 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
1022 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
1023 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
1024 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib\\} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
1025 -ic:\\nasmlib\\}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
1027 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
1028 changed with version 0.98.31.
1031 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
1033 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
1034 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
1035 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
1036 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
1037 skipping this section.
1040 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
1042 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
1043 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
1044 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
1045 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
1046 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
1047 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
1048 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
1051 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
1053 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
1054 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
1055 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
1056 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
1057 if you declare, for example,
1062 then the two lines of code
1067 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
1068 identical-looking syntaxes.
1070 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
1071 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
1072 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1073 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1074 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1075 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1076 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1077 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1079 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1080 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1081 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1082 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1083 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1084 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1086 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1087 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1088 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1089 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1090 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1091 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1092 \e{everything} is a label.
1094 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1095 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1096 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1097 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1098 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1099 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1102 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1104 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1105 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1106 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1107 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1108 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1109 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1110 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1112 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1113 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1114 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1115 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1116 the strings being manipulated.
1119 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1121 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1122 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1123 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1124 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1127 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1129 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1130 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1131 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1132 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1133 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1134 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1135 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1136 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1137 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1141 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1143 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1144 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1145 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1146 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1148 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1149 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1150 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1151 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1154 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1156 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1157 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1159 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1160 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1161 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1162 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1163 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1164 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1165 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1167 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1168 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1172 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1174 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1176 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1177 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1178 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1180 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1182 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1183 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1184 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1185 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1187 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1188 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1189 backslash-ended line.
1191 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1192 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1193 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1194 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1195 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1196 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1197 NASM with the command-line option
1198 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1199 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1201 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1202 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1203 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1204 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1205 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1206 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1207 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1208 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1209 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1210 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1212 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1213 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1214 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1215 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1216 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1217 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1218 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1219 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1220 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1221 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1222 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1223 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1224 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1225 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1228 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1229 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1230 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1232 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1233 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1235 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1236 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1237 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1238 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1239 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1240 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1242 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1243 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1244 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1246 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1248 For example, you can code:
1250 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1251 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1253 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1254 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1256 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1257 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1258 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1261 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1263 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1264 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1265 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1266 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1267 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1268 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1269 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1273 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1275 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1276 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1277 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1278 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1280 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1281 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1282 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1283 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1284 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1285 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1286 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1287 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1288 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1289 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1290 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1291 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1292 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1294 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1297 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1299 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1300 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1301 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1302 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1303 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1304 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1305 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1306 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1307 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1311 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1312 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1313 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1314 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1316 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1318 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1319 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1320 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1321 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1324 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1325 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1326 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1327 \c ; actually include at most 512
1329 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1330 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1331 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1332 overridden if desired.
1335 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1337 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1338 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1339 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1340 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1343 \c message db 'hello, world'
1344 \c msglen equ $-message
1346 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1347 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1348 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1349 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1350 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1351 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1354 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1356 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1357 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1358 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1361 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1363 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1364 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1365 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1367 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1368 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1370 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1371 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1372 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1376 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1377 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1378 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1380 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1382 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1383 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1384 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1385 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1386 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1389 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1391 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1392 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1393 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1394 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1399 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1400 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1402 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1403 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1405 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1406 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1408 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1411 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1412 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1415 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1416 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1418 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1419 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1420 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1421 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1422 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1423 bytes to store a zero offset.
1425 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1426 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1427 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1428 default segment registers.
1430 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1431 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1432 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1433 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1434 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1435 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1436 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1437 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1438 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1439 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1440 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1442 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1443 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1444 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1445 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1446 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1447 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1448 the offset to be lost.
1450 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1451 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1452 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1453 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1454 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1455 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1457 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1458 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1459 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1460 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1463 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1465 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1466 character, string and floating-point.
1469 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1471 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1472 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1473 suffix \c{H} or \c{X}, \c{D} or \c{T}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} or
1474 \c{Y} for \i{hexadecimal}, \i{decimal}, \i{octal} and \i{binary}
1475 respectively, or you can prefix \c{0x}, for hexadecimal in the style
1476 of C, or you can prefix \c{$} for hexadecimal in the style of Borland
1477 Pascal or Motorola Assemblers. Note, though, that the \I{$,
1478 prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on identifiers (see
1479 \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$} sign must have a
1480 digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter. In addition, current
1481 versions of NASM accept the prefix \c{0h} for hexadecimal, \c{0d} or
1482 \c{0t} for decimal, \c{0o} or \c{0q} for octal, and \c{0b} or \c{0y}
1483 for binary. Please note that unlike C, a \c{0} prefix by itself does
1484 \e{not} imply an octal constant!
1486 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1489 Some examples (all producing exactly the same code):
1491 \c mov ax,200 ; decimal
1492 \c mov ax,0200 ; still decimal
1493 \c mov ax,0200d ; explicitly decimal
1494 \c mov ax,0d200 ; also decimal
1495 \c mov ax,0c8h ; hex
1496 \c mov ax,$0c8 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1497 \c mov ax,0xc8 ; hex yet again
1498 \c mov ax,0hc8 ; still hex
1499 \c mov ax,310q ; octal
1500 \c mov ax,310o ; octal again
1501 \c mov ax,0o310 ; octal yet again
1502 \c mov ax,0q310 ; octal yet again
1503 \c mov ax,11001000b ; binary
1504 \c mov ax,1100_1000b ; same binary constant
1505 \c mov ax,1100_1000y ; same binary constant once more
1506 \c mov ax,0b1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1507 \c mov ax,0y1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1509 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1511 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1512 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1513 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1514 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1515 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1516 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1517 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1520 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1522 \c \' single quote (')
1523 \c \" double quote (")
1525 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1526 \c \? question mark (?)
1534 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1535 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1536 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1537 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1538 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1540 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1541 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1544 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1545 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1547 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1548 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1549 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1552 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1554 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1555 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1557 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1558 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1562 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1563 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1564 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1565 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1566 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1569 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1571 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1572 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1573 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1574 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1575 certain preprocessor directives.
1577 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1578 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1579 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1581 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1582 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1584 And the following are also equivalent:
1586 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1587 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1588 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1590 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1591 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1592 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1593 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1594 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1595 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1597 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1599 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1600 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1601 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1605 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1606 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1608 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1609 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1611 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1612 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1613 an expression context.
1615 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1617 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1618 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1619 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1620 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1621 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1622 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1624 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1625 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1626 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1627 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1628 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant.
1630 NASM also support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x},
1631 hexadecimal digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then
1632 optionally a \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent
1633 in decimal notation. As an extension, NASM additionally supports the
1634 \c{0h} and \c{$} prefixes for hexadecimal, as well binary and octal
1635 floating-point, using the \c{0b} or \c{0y} and \c{0o} or \c{0q}
1636 prefixes, respectively.
1638 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1639 floating-point constants as well.
1643 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1644 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1645 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1646 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1647 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1648 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1649 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1650 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1651 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1652 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1653 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1655 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1656 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1657 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1658 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1659 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1661 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1662 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1663 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1664 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1665 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1666 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1667 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1668 floating-point number, respectively.
1672 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1674 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1675 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1677 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1679 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1680 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1681 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1682 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1683 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1684 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1685 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1686 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1687 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1689 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1690 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1691 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1692 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1694 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1695 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1697 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1699 The \c{%use fp} standard macro package contains a set of convenience
1700 macros. See \k{pkg_fp}.
1702 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1704 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1705 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1706 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1708 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1713 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1714 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1719 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1721 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1722 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1725 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1726 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1727 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1728 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1729 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1730 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1731 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1733 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1734 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1737 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1739 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1740 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1741 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1744 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1746 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1749 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1751 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1754 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1756 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1757 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1758 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1759 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1760 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1763 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1764 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1766 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1770 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1771 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1773 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1774 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1775 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1776 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1777 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1779 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1780 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1782 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1783 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1784 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1787 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1788 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1790 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1791 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1792 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1793 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1794 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1795 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1798 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1800 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1801 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1802 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1803 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1805 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1806 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1807 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1809 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1813 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1815 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1816 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1817 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1818 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1819 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1821 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1823 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1825 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1826 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1828 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1829 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1830 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1831 could code either of
1833 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1834 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1836 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1837 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1840 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1841 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1842 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1844 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1847 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1849 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1850 invent one using the macro processor.
1853 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1855 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1856 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1857 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1858 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1859 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1860 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1861 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1865 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1867 \c push strict dword 33
1869 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1872 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1873 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1876 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1878 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1879 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1880 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1882 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1883 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1884 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1885 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1886 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1888 \c times (label-$) db 0
1889 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1891 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1892 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1893 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1894 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1897 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1898 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1900 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1903 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1904 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1905 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1906 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1907 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1909 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1911 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1912 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1913 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1914 label. So, for example:
1916 \c label1 ; some code
1924 \c label2 ; some code
1932 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1933 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1934 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1935 previous non-local label.
1937 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1938 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1939 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1940 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1941 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1942 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1943 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1946 \c label3 ; some more code
1951 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1952 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1953 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1954 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1955 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1956 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1957 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1958 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1959 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1960 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1962 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1963 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1964 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1965 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1966 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1968 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1970 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1971 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1972 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}),
1973 \c{..imagebase} is used to find out the offset from a base address
1974 of the current image in the \c{win64} output format (see \k{win64pic}).
1975 So just keep in mind that symbols beginning with a double period are
1979 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1981 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1982 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1983 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1984 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1987 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1988 character into a single line. Thus:
1990 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1993 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1996 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1998 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
2000 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
2001 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
2004 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
2005 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
2007 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
2009 which will expand to
2011 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
2013 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
2014 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
2015 not at definition time. Thus the code
2017 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
2022 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
2023 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
2025 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
2026 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
2027 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
2028 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
2029 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
2030 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
2033 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
2034 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
2035 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
2036 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
2039 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
2043 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
2044 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
2045 for an example of its use.
2047 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
2048 macros: if you write
2050 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
2051 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
2053 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
2054 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
2055 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
2060 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
2061 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
2062 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
2064 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
2065 perfectly well define a macro with
2069 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
2073 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
2074 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
2075 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
2077 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
2078 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
2081 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
2083 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
2084 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
2085 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
2086 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
2087 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
2089 Suppose you have the following code:
2092 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2101 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2102 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2103 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2104 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2105 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2108 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2109 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2110 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2112 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2113 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2114 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2118 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2122 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2123 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2124 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2127 \S{indmacro} \i{Macro Indirection}: \I\c{%[}\c{%[...]}
2129 The \c{%[...]} construct can be used to expand macros in contexts
2130 where macro expansion would otherwise not occur, including in the
2131 names other macros. For example, if you have a set of macros named
2132 \c{Foo16}, \c{Foo32} and \c{Foo64}, you could write:
2134 \c mov ax,Foo%[__BITS__] ; The Foo value
2136 to use the builtin macro \c{__BITS__} (see \k{bitsm}) to automatically
2137 select between them. Similarly, the two statements:
2139 \c %xdefine Bar Quux ; Expands due to %xdefine
2140 \c %define Bar %[Quux] ; Expands due to %[...]
2142 have, in fact, exactly the same effect.
2144 \c{%[...]} concatenates to adjacent tokens in the same way that
2145 multi-line macro parameters do, see \k{concat} for details.
2148 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2150 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2151 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2152 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2154 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2155 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2157 As an example, consider the following:
2159 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2161 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2167 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2170 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2171 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2173 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2174 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2176 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2178 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2180 Now the above code can be written as:
2182 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2183 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2185 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2186 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2189 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2191 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2192 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2193 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2194 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2195 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2196 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2200 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2212 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2214 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2215 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2217 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2220 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2222 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2223 example, the following sequence:
2230 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2231 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2233 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2234 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2238 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2240 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2241 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2242 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2243 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2245 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2246 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2247 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2248 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2250 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2251 later, so you can do things like
2255 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2257 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2258 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2259 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2261 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2262 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2263 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2264 involving a register).
2267 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2269 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2270 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2271 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2276 \c %defstr test TEST
2280 \c %define test 'TEST'
2282 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2285 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2288 \S{deftok} Defining Tokens: \I\c{%ideftok}\i\c{%deftok}
2290 \c{%deftok}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ideftok}, define
2291 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2292 second parameter, after string conversion, to a sequence of tokens.
2296 \c %deftok test 'TEST'
2300 \c %define test TEST
2303 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2305 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2306 supports a few simple string handling macro operators from which
2307 more complex operations can be constructed.
2309 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2310 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro. When producing a string
2311 value, it may change the style of quoting of the input string or
2312 strings, and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings.
2314 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2316 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2317 a single-line macro.
2321 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2323 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2326 \c %strcat beta '"foo"\', "'bar'"
2328 ... would assign the value \c{`"foo"\\\\'bar'`} to \c{beta}.
2330 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2333 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2335 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2338 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2340 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2341 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2342 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2343 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2345 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2346 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2348 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2349 assigned the value of 9.
2352 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2354 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2355 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2356 than the description:
2358 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2359 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2360 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2361 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2362 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2363 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2365 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2366 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2367 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2368 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2369 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2370 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2371 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2372 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2373 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2376 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2378 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2379 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2382 \c %macro prologue 1
2390 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2391 invoke the macro with a call such as
2393 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2395 which would expand to the three lines of code
2401 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2402 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2403 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2404 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2405 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2408 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2409 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2411 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2412 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2413 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2422 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2423 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2424 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2427 \S{mlrmacro} \i{Recursive Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%irmacro}\i\c{%rmacro}
2429 A multi-line macro cannot be referenced within itself, in order to
2430 prevent accidental infinite recursion and allow instruction overloading.
2432 Recursive multi-line macros allow for self-referencing, with the
2433 caveat that the user is aware of the existence, use and purpose of
2434 recursive multi-line macros. There is also a generous, but sane, upper
2435 limit to the number of recursions, in order to prevent run-away memory
2436 consumption in case of accidental infinite recursion.
2438 As with non-recursive multi-line macros, recursive multi-line macros are
2439 \i{case-sensitive}, unless you define them using the alternative
2440 directive \c{%irmacro}.
2443 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2445 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2446 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2447 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2448 parameters at all. So you could define
2450 \c %macro prologue 0
2457 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2458 allocates no local stack space.
2460 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2461 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2470 so that you could code
2472 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2473 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2475 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2476 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2477 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2478 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2479 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2480 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2483 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2485 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2486 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2487 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2488 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2489 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2490 flag is set by doing this:
2500 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2501 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2502 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2503 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2504 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2505 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2506 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2507 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2508 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2511 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2513 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2514 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2515 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2516 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2517 you might want to be able to write
2519 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2521 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2522 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2523 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2524 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2527 \c %macro writefile 2+
2533 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2540 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2541 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2542 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2543 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2546 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2547 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2550 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2551 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2552 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2553 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2554 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2555 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2556 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2559 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2560 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2563 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2565 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2566 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2569 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2571 \S{mlmacrange} \i{Macro Parameters Range}
2573 NASM allows you to expand parameters via special construction \c{%\{x:y\}}
2574 where \c{x} is the first parameter index and \c{y} is the last. Any index can
2575 be either negative or positive but must never be zero.
2585 expands to \c{3,4,5} range.
2587 Even more, the parameters can be reversed so that
2595 expands to \c{5,4,3} range.
2597 But even this is not the last. The parameters can be addressed via negative
2598 indices so NASM will count them reversed. The ones who know Python may see
2607 expands to \c{6,5,4} range.
2609 Note that NASM uses \i{comma} to separate parameters being expanded.
2611 By the way, here is a trick - you might use the index \c{%{-1:-1}}
2612 which gives you the \i{last} argument passed to a macro.
2614 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2616 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2617 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2618 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2620 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2628 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2629 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2630 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2631 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2632 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2634 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2635 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2636 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2637 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2639 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2641 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2642 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2643 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2644 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2646 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2647 too many default parameters:
2649 \c %macro quux 1 something
2651 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2653 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2654 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2655 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2656 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2657 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2659 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2660 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2661 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2662 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2663 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2665 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2666 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2667 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2669 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2671 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2672 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2673 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2676 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2678 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2679 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2680 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2681 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2682 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2683 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2686 \S{percent00} \i\c{%00}: \I{label preceeding macro}Label Preceeding Macro
2688 \c{%00} will return the label preceeding the macro invocation, if any. The
2689 label must be on the same line as the macro invocation, may be a local label
2690 (see \k{locallab}), and need not end in a colon.
2693 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2695 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2696 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2697 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2698 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2699 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2700 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2702 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2703 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2704 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2705 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2707 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2708 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2709 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2710 parameters are rotated to the right.
2712 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2713 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2715 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2724 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2725 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2726 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2727 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2728 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2729 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2730 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2732 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2733 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2734 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2736 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2737 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2738 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2739 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2740 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2741 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2742 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2744 This can be done by the following definition:
2746 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2755 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2756 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2757 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2758 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2759 iterated through in reverse order.
2762 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2764 NASM can concatenate macro parameters and macro indirection constructs
2765 on to other text surrounding them. This allows you to declare a family
2766 of symbols, for example, in a macro definition. If, for example, you
2767 wanted to generate a table of key codes along with offsets into the
2768 table, you could code something like
2770 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2772 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2778 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2779 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2780 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2782 which would expand to
2785 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2787 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2789 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2792 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2793 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2795 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2796 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2797 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2798 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2799 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2800 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2801 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2803 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2804 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2805 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2806 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2807 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2808 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2809 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2810 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2811 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2812 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2814 The single-line macro indirection construct, \c{%[...]}
2815 (\k{indmacro}), behaves the same way as macro parameters for the
2816 purpose of concatenation.
2818 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2821 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2823 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2824 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2825 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2826 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2827 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2828 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2831 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2832 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2833 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2834 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2844 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2845 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2846 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2849 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2850 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2851 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2852 because no inverse condition code exists.
2855 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2857 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2858 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2859 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2860 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2861 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2864 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2865 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2866 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2867 the number of parameters, like this:
2869 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2873 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2875 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2877 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2878 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2879 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2880 that argument specification.
2889 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2896 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2897 specification does not match exactly.
2900 \S{exitmacro} Exiting Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%exitmacro}
2902 Multi-line macro expansions can be arbitrarily terminated with
2903 the \c{%exitmacro} directive.
2916 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2918 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2919 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2920 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2923 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2924 \c %elif<condition2>
2925 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2927 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2930 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2932 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2933 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2935 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2936 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2937 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2938 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2940 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2941 single-line macro existence}
2943 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2944 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2945 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2946 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2948 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2951 \c ; perform some function
2953 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2955 \c ; go and do something else
2957 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2958 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2959 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2961 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2962 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2963 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2967 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2968 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2970 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2971 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2973 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2974 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2975 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2978 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2979 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2981 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2983 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2987 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2989 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2995 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2996 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2999 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
3000 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
3001 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
3004 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
3007 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
3008 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
3009 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
3010 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
3011 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
3013 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
3014 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
3017 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
3018 arbitrary numeric expressions}
3020 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
3021 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
3022 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
3023 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
3024 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
3026 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
3027 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
3029 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
3030 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
3031 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
3032 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
3033 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
3034 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
3035 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
3036 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
3037 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
3038 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
3039 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
3040 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
3041 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
3042 for true and 0 for false.
3044 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
3045 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
3047 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
3048 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
3050 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
3051 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
3052 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
3053 Differences in white space are not counted.
3055 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
3057 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
3058 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
3060 \c %macro pushparam 1
3071 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
3072 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
3073 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
3074 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
3076 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
3077 Types\I{testing, token types}
3079 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
3080 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
3081 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
3082 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
3085 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
3086 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
3087 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
3088 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
3089 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
3091 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
3092 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
3094 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
3103 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
3104 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
3115 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
3116 the following two ways:
3118 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
3119 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
3121 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
3122 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
3123 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
3124 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
3126 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
3127 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
3128 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
3129 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
3130 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
3132 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
3133 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
3134 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
3135 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
3137 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
3139 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
3140 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
3141 versus a multi-token sequence.
3143 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
3144 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
3145 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
3151 will assemble the subsequent code, but
3155 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
3156 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
3158 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
3159 variants are also provided.
3161 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
3163 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
3164 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
3165 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
3167 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
3168 variants are also provided.
3170 \S{ifenv} \i\c{%ifenv}: Test If Environment Variable Exists
3172 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifenv} assembles the
3173 subsequent code if and only if the environment variable referenced by
3174 the \c{%!<env>} directive exists.
3176 The usual \i\c{%elifenv}, \i\c\{%ifnenv}, and \i\c{%elifnenv}
3177 variants are also provided.
3179 Just as for \c{%!<env>} the argument should be written as a string if
3180 it contains characters that would not be legal in an identifier. See
3183 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
3185 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
3186 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
3187 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
3188 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
3190 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
3191 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
3192 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
3193 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
3197 \c inc word [table+2*i]
3201 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
3202 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
3205 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
3206 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
3207 terminate the loop, like this:
3222 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
3224 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
3225 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
3226 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
3227 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
3228 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
3229 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
3231 Note a maximum repeat count is limited by 62 bit number, though it
3232 is hardly possible that you ever need anything bigger.
3235 \H{while} \i{Conditional Loops}: \i\c{%while}
3237 The directives \c{%while} and \i\c{%endwhile} combine preprocessor
3238 loops with conditional assembly, allowing the enclosed chunk of
3239 code to be replicated as long as certain conditions are met:
3241 \c %while<condition>
3242 \c ; some code which only repeats while <condition> is met
3245 \S{exitwhile} Exiting Conditional Loops: \i\c{%exitwhile}
3247 Conditional loops can be arbitrarily terminated with the
3248 \i\c{%exitwhile} directive.
3252 \c %while<condition>
3253 \c %if<some other condition>
3256 \c ; some code which only repeats while <condition> is met
3260 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3262 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3264 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3266 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3267 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3268 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3270 \c %include "macros.mac"
3272 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3273 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3275 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3276 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3277 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3278 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3279 line using the \c{-i} option.
3281 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3282 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3285 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3286 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3287 \c ; now define some macros
3290 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3291 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3292 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3294 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3295 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3296 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3299 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3301 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3302 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3303 be the include-path-resolved version of the filename, if the file
3304 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3308 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3310 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3311 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3314 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3316 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3317 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3318 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3320 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3321 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3322 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3324 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3325 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3330 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3331 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3332 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3335 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3337 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3338 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3339 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3340 described in \k{macropkg}.
3342 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3343 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted. In NASM
3344 2.04 and 2.05 the unquoted form would be macro-expanded; this is no
3345 longer true. Thus, the following lines are equivalent:
3350 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3351 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3352 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3354 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3356 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3357 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3358 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3359 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3360 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3361 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3362 able to nest these loops.
3364 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3365 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3366 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3367 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3368 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3371 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3372 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3374 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3375 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} takes an optional argument,
3376 which is the name of the context. For example:
3380 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can have
3381 several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can still be
3382 distinguished. If no name is given, the context is unnamed (this is
3383 normally used when both the \c{%push} and the \c{%pop} are inside a
3384 single macro definition.)
3386 The directive \c{%pop}, taking one optional argument, removes the top
3387 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3388 labels associated with it. If an argument is given, it must match the
3389 name of the current context, otherwise it will issue an error.
3392 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3394 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3395 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3396 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3397 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3398 above could be implemented by means of:
3414 and invoked by means of, for example,
3422 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3425 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3426 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3427 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3430 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3432 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3433 a particular context, in just the same way:
3435 \c %define %$localmac 3
3437 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3438 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3439 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3442 \S{ctxfallthrough} \i{Context Fall-Through Lookup}
3444 Context fall-through lookup (automatic searching of outer contexts)
3445 is a feature that was added in NASM version 0.98.03. Unfortunately,
3446 this feature is unintuitive and can result in buggy code that would
3447 have otherwise been prevented by NASM's error reporting. As a result,
3448 this feature has been \e{deprecated}. NASM version 2.09 will issue a
3449 warning when usage of this \e{deprecated} feature is detected. Starting
3450 with NASM version 2.10, usage of this \e{deprecated} feature will simply
3451 result in an \e{expression syntax error}.
3453 An example usage of this \e{deprecated} feature follows:
3457 \c %assign %$external 1
3459 \c %assign %$internal 1
3460 \c mov eax, %$external
3461 \c mov eax, %$internal
3466 As demonstrated, \c{%$external} is being defined in the \c{ctx1}
3467 context and referenced within the \c{ctx2} context. With context
3468 fall-through lookup, referencing an undefined context-local macro
3469 like this implicitly searches through all outer contexts until a match
3470 is made or isn't found in any context. As a result, \c{%$external}
3471 referenced within the \c{ctx2} context would implicitly use \c{%$external}
3472 as defined in \c{ctx1}. Most people would expect NASM to issue an error in
3473 this situation because \c{%$external} was never defined within \c{ctx2} and also
3474 isn't qualified with the proper context depth, \c{%$$external}.
3476 Here is a revision of the above example with proper context depth:
3480 \c %assign %$external 1
3482 \c %assign %$internal 1
3483 \c mov eax, %$$external
3484 \c mov eax, %$internal
3489 As demonstrated, \c{%$external} is still being defined in the \c{ctx1}
3490 context and referenced within the \c{ctx2} context. However, the
3491 reference to \c{%$external} within \c{ctx2} has been fully qualified with
3492 the proper context depth, \c{%$$external}, and thus is no longer ambiguous,
3493 unintuitive or erroneous.
3496 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3498 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3499 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3500 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3501 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3502 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3504 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3505 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3506 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3511 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3514 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3516 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3517 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3518 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3534 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3548 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3553 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3554 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3555 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3556 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3559 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3560 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3561 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3562 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3563 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3565 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3566 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3567 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3568 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3569 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3571 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3593 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3594 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3595 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3596 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3599 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3601 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3602 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3604 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3606 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3608 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3611 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3613 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3614 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3615 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3617 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3618 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3619 convenient to use and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3620 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3624 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3625 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3626 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3633 \c %pop ; restore original context
3635 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3636 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3637 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3638 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3641 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3643 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3644 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3645 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3646 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3647 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3651 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3652 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3653 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3655 \c %stacksize flat64
3657 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3658 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3659 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3663 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3664 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3665 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3669 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3670 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3671 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3672 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3673 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3674 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3675 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3679 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3681 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3682 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3683 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3684 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3685 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3686 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3687 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3689 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3690 An example of its use is the following:
3694 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3695 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3696 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3697 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3699 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3700 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3701 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3706 \c leave ; restore old bp
3709 \c %pop ; restore original context
3711 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3712 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3713 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3714 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3715 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3716 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3717 as shown in the example.
3720 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3722 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3723 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3724 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3725 right macros by means of code like this:
3730 \c ; do some different setup
3732 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3735 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3736 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3737 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3738 knowing what went wrong.
3740 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3745 \c ; do some different setup
3747 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3751 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3752 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3753 depend on symbol values.
3755 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3756 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3757 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3760 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3761 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3762 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3763 the user. For example:
3766 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3767 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3771 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3773 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3774 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3776 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of another
3777 preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3779 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3780 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3782 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3784 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3785 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3786 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3787 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3788 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3789 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3792 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3793 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3794 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3796 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3798 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3799 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3800 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3801 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3802 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3803 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3805 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3806 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3810 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3812 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3813 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3814 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3815 could be used at some other point in your code.
3817 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3818 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3819 could do that as follows:
3821 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3823 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3825 If the name of the environment variable contains non-identifier
3826 characters, you can use string quotes to surround the name of the
3827 variable, for example:
3829 \c %defstr C_colon %!'C:'
3832 \S{final} \i\c{%final} Directive
3834 The \c{%final} directive is used to delay preprocessing of a line
3835 until all other "normal" preprocessing is complete. Multiple
3836 \c{%final} directives are processed in the opposite order of their
3837 declaration, last one first and first one last.
3840 \H{comment} Comment Blocks: \i\c{%comment}
3842 The \c{%comment} and \c{%endcomment} directives are used to specify
3843 a block of commented (i.e. unprocessed) code/text. Everything between
3844 \c{%comment} and \c{%endcomment} will be ignored by the preprocessor.
3847 \c ; some code, text or data to be ignored
3851 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3853 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3854 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3855 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3856 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3857 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3859 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3860 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3861 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3865 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3867 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3868 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3869 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3870 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3871 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3872 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3873 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3875 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3876 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3879 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3881 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3882 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3883 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3884 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3885 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3886 would be equivalent to:
3894 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3895 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3896 values will be present in memory.
3899 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3901 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3902 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3911 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3913 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3914 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3915 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3916 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3917 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3918 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3920 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3921 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3922 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3923 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3924 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3925 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3926 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3927 here'. You could then write a macro
3929 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3938 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3939 find the crash point.
3942 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3944 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3945 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3946 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3947 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3948 mode-dependent macros.
3950 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3952 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3953 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3956 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3957 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3958 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3959 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3963 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3965 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3968 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3969 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3972 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3973 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3974 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3976 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3977 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3978 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3979 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3981 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3982 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3983 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3984 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3987 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3988 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3989 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3990 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3991 local time as if it was UTC.
3993 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3994 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3995 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3996 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3997 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
4000 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
4001 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
4002 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
4003 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
4004 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
4005 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
4006 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
4007 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
4008 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
4011 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
4014 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
4015 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
4016 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
4017 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
4019 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
4020 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
4023 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
4025 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
4026 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
4027 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
4028 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
4030 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
4031 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
4032 change in future versions of NASM.}
4035 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
4037 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
4038 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
4039 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
4040 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
4042 \c{STRUC} takes one or two parameters. The first parameter is the name
4043 of the data type. The second, optional parameter is the base offset of
4044 the structure. The name of the data type is defined as a symbol with
4045 the value of the base offset, and the name of the data type with the
4046 suffix \c{_size} appended to it is defined as an \c{EQU} giving the
4047 size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been issued, you are
4048 defining the structure, and should define fields using the \c{RESB}
4049 family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish
4052 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
4053 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
4064 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
4065 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
4066 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
4067 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
4069 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero by default
4070 is a side effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
4071 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
4072 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
4083 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
4084 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
4086 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
4087 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
4088 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
4089 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
4090 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
4091 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
4092 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
4094 Sometimes you only have the address of the structure displaced by an
4095 offset. For example, consider this standard stack frame setup:
4101 In this case, you could access an element by subtracting the offset:
4103 \c mov [ebp - 40 + mytype.word], ax
4105 However, if you do not want to repeat this offset, you can use -40 as
4108 \c struc mytype, -40
4110 And access an element this way:
4112 \c mov [ebp + mytype.word], ax
4115 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
4116 \i{Instances of Structures}
4118 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
4119 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
4120 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
4121 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
4122 you code something like this:
4127 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
4128 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
4129 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
4130 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
4134 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
4135 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
4136 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
4137 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
4138 they were specified in the structure definition.
4140 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
4141 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
4142 the \c{AT} line. For example:
4144 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
4147 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
4148 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
4152 \c db 'hello, world'
4156 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
4158 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
4159 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
4160 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
4161 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
4163 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
4164 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
4165 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
4166 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
4167 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
4169 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
4170 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
4171 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
4172 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
4173 perform the alignment.
4175 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
4176 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
4177 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
4178 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
4179 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
4180 except for special purposes.
4182 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
4183 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
4184 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
4185 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
4188 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
4189 be used within structure definitions:
4206 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
4207 relative to the base of the structure.
4209 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
4210 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
4211 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
4212 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
4213 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
4214 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
4215 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
4217 Both \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} do call \c{SECTALIGN} macro implicitly.
4218 See \k{sectalign} for details.
4220 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
4223 \S{sectalign} \i\c{SECTALIGN}: Section Alignment
4225 The \c{SECTALIGN} macros provides a way to modify alignment attribute
4226 of output file section. Unlike the \c{align=} attribute (which is allowed
4227 at section definition only) the \c{SECTALIGN} macro may be used at any time.
4229 For example the directive
4233 sets the section alignment requirements to 16 bytes. Once increased it can
4234 not be decreased, the magnitude may grow only.
4236 Note that \c{ALIGN} (see \k{align}) calls the \c{SECTALIGN} macro implicitly
4237 so the active section alignment requirements may be updated. This is by default
4238 behaviour, if for some reason you want the \c{ALIGN} do not call \c{SECTALIGN}
4239 at all use the directive
4243 It is still possible to turn in on again by
4248 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
4250 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
4251 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
4252 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
4253 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
4255 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
4259 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
4261 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
4262 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
4263 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
4264 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
4265 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
4266 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
4273 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
4279 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
4281 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
4282 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
4283 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
4284 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
4285 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
4286 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
4287 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
4290 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
4291 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
4292 and an optional jump threshold override. If (for any reason) you need
4293 to turn off the jump completely just set jump threshold value to -1
4294 (or set it to \c{nojmp}). The following modes are possible:
4296 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
4297 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
4300 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
4301 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
4302 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
4304 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
4305 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4308 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
4309 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4312 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
4313 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
4314 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
4315 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
4317 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
4318 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
4319 are used internally by this macro package.
4322 \H{pkg_fp} \i\c\{fp}: Floating-point macros
4324 This packages contains the following floating-point convenience macros:
4326 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
4327 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
4328 \c %define QNaN __QNaN__
4329 \c %define SNaN __SNaN__
4331 \c %define float8(x) __float8__(x)
4332 \c %define float16(x) __float16__(x)
4333 \c %define float32(x) __float32__(x)
4334 \c %define float64(x) __float64__(x)
4335 \c %define float80m(x) __float80m__(x)
4336 \c %define float80e(x) __float80e__(x)
4337 \c %define float128l(x) __float128l__(x)
4338 \c %define float128h(x) __float128h__(x)
4341 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
4343 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
4344 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
4345 directives. These are described in this chapter.
4347 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
4348 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
4349 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
4350 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
4351 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
4352 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
4354 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
4357 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
4358 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
4359 order to control particular features of that file format. These
4360 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
4361 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
4364 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
4366 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
4367 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
4368 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
4369 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
4371 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
4372 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
4373 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
4374 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
4375 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
4376 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
4377 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
4378 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
4380 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
4381 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
4382 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
4383 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
4384 device drivers and boot loader software.
4386 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
4387 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
4388 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
4389 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
4391 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
4392 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
4393 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
4394 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
4395 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
4398 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
4399 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
4400 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
4402 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
4403 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
4404 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
4405 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
4406 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
4409 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
4410 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4411 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4412 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4415 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4416 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4417 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4419 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4421 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4423 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4424 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4427 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4429 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4430 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4431 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4432 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4435 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4436 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4437 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4438 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4439 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4440 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4442 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4443 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4444 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4445 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4447 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4449 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4452 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4453 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4454 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4455 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4456 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4457 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4458 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4461 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4462 \k{multisec}, all support
4463 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4464 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4465 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4466 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4470 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4472 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4473 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4474 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4475 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4476 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4477 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4478 it. So the user-level directive
4482 expands to the two lines
4484 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4487 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4488 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4489 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4491 \c %macro writefile 2+
4501 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4508 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4509 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4510 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4511 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4512 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4513 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4514 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4515 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4516 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4517 code in any of several separate code sections.
4520 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4522 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4523 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4524 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4525 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4526 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4528 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4536 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4537 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4538 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4540 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4541 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4543 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4544 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4546 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4547 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4548 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4549 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4551 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4553 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4555 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4557 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4561 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4562 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4566 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4567 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4568 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4569 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4570 needs to be made resident.
4573 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4575 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4576 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4577 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4578 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4579 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4580 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4582 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4583 argument is the name of a symbol:
4586 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4588 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4589 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4590 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4591 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4592 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4593 by means of the directive
4595 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4597 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4598 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4599 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4601 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4602 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4603 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4606 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4608 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4609 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4610 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4611 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4612 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4614 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4615 the definition of the symbol.
4617 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4618 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4619 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4625 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4626 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4627 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4630 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4632 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4633 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4637 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4639 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4640 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4641 uninitialized data section, so that
4645 is similar in function to
4652 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4653 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4654 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4655 at the same piece of memory.
4657 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4658 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4659 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4660 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4662 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4663 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4665 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4666 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4667 only one argument at a time.
4670 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4672 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4673 are available on the specified CPU.
4677 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4679 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4681 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4683 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4685 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4687 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4689 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4691 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4693 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4695 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4697 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4699 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4701 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4703 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4705 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4707 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4709 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4711 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4712 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4713 instructions are available.
4716 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4718 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4719 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4722 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4724 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4726 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4728 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4730 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4732 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4734 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4736 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4737 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4738 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4740 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4741 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4744 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4746 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4747 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4748 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4749 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4750 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4751 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4753 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4754 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4755 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4756 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4757 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4758 The extensions are given with each format below.
4761 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4763 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4764 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4765 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4766 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4767 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4770 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4771 how NASM handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4773 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4774 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4775 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4776 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4778 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4779 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4780 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4781 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4784 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4786 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4787 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4788 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4789 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4791 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4798 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4799 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4800 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4801 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4802 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4803 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4804 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4807 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4808 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4810 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4811 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4812 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4813 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4815 \c section .data align=16
4817 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4818 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4820 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4821 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4822 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4823 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4826 \S{multisec} \i{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} Support for the \c{bin} Format
4828 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4829 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4831 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4832 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4835 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4836 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4839 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4840 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4843 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4844 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4847 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4848 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4849 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4851 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4852 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4854 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4857 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4858 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4861 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4862 alignment has been specified.
4864 \b Sections may not overlap.
4866 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4867 which may be used in your code.
4869 \S{map}\i{Map Files}
4871 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4872 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4873 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4874 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4875 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4876 brackets must be used.
4879 \H{ithfmt} \i\c{ith}: \i{Intel Hex} Output
4881 The \c{ith} file format produces Intel hex-format files. Just as the
4882 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4883 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4886 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4887 the \c{ith} file format.
4889 \c{ith} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.ith}.
4892 \H{srecfmt} \i\c{srec}: \i{Motorola S-Records} Output
4894 The \c{srec} file format produces Motorola S-records files. Just as the
4895 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4896 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4899 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4900 the \c{srec} file format.
4902 \c{srec} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.srec}.
4905 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4907 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4908 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4909 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4910 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4912 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4914 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4915 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4916 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4917 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4920 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4921 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4922 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4924 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4925 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4926 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4928 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4929 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4930 address of the segment. So, for example:
4939 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4940 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4941 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4944 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4945 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4950 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4952 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4954 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4955 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4958 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4959 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4961 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4962 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4963 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4964 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4966 \c segment code private align=16
4968 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4969 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4970 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4972 The available qualifiers are:
4974 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4975 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4976 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4977 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4978 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4979 than stuck end-to-end.
4981 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4982 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4983 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4984 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4985 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4986 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4987 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4988 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4989 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4991 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4992 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4993 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4994 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4996 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4997 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4998 overlay-capable linker.
5000 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
5001 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
5002 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
5003 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
5005 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
5006 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
5007 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
5008 defines the group if it is not already defined.
5010 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
5011 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
5012 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
5013 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
5014 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
5015 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
5017 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
5018 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
5021 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
5023 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
5024 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
5025 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
5034 \c ; some uninitialized data
5036 \c group dgroup data bss
5038 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
5039 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
5040 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
5041 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
5042 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
5045 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
5046 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
5047 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
5048 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
5049 base rather than the segment base.
5051 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
5052 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
5053 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
5054 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
5056 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
5057 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
5058 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
5059 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
5062 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
5064 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
5065 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
5066 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
5067 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
5068 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
5069 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
5070 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
5072 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
5075 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
5076 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
5078 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
5079 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
5080 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
5081 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
5083 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
5084 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
5085 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
5088 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
5090 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
5091 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
5092 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
5093 once you have imported it. For example:
5095 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
5098 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
5099 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
5101 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
5102 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
5103 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
5104 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
5106 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
5107 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
5108 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
5109 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
5110 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
5111 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
5114 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
5115 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
5116 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
5117 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
5118 available attributes are:
5120 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
5121 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
5122 frequently used symbols imported by name.
5124 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
5125 does not make use of any initialized data.
5127 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
5128 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
5129 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
5131 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
5132 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
5138 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
5139 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
5140 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
5143 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
5146 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
5147 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
5148 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
5149 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
5150 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
5154 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
5155 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
5157 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
5161 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
5162 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
5163 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
5164 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
5166 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
5167 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
5168 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
5170 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
5171 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
5172 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
5175 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
5177 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
5178 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
5181 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
5183 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
5184 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
5185 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
5188 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
5189 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
5190 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
5194 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
5195 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
5197 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
5198 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
5199 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
5201 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
5202 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
5204 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
5205 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
5206 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
5207 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
5208 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
5210 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
5211 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
5212 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
5213 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
5214 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
5217 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
5218 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
5220 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
5221 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
5222 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
5223 declarations could equivalently be
5225 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
5226 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
5228 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
5229 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
5230 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
5232 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
5233 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
5234 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
5237 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
5239 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
5240 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
5241 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
5242 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
5244 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
5246 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
5247 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
5248 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
5249 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
5250 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
5251 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
5252 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
5253 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
5256 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5257 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
5259 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
5260 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5261 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5262 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
5263 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
5266 The available qualifiers are:
5268 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
5269 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
5270 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
5273 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
5274 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
5275 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
5276 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
5278 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
5279 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
5282 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
5283 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
5284 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
5285 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
5286 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
5289 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5290 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
5291 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
5292 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
5293 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
5294 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
5295 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
5296 for data (and BSS) sections.
5297 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
5298 alignment), though the value does not matter.
5300 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5303 \c section .text code align=16
5304 \c section .data data align=4
5305 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
5306 \c section .bss bss align=4
5308 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
5310 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
5312 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
5313 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
5314 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
5315 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
5316 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
5317 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
5318 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
5319 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
5320 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
5321 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
5322 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
5323 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
5324 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
5326 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
5327 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
5328 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
5330 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
5332 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
5334 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
5335 line to source code:
5339 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
5340 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
5341 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
5342 still be perfectly possible.
5344 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
5345 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
5346 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
5347 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
5348 table." Its typical use would be:
5351 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
5352 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
5353 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
5356 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5357 \c push DWORD caption
5360 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
5361 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5362 \c ; for exception handler
5366 \c push DWORD handler
5367 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
5368 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
5370 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
5371 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
5374 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5375 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5377 \c section .drectve info
5378 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5380 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
5381 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
5382 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
5383 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
5384 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
5385 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
5386 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
5387 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
5388 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
5389 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
5390 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
5391 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
5392 caused application failure.
5394 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
5395 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
5396 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
5397 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
5398 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
5401 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
5403 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
5404 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
5405 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
5406 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
5407 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
5409 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
5411 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
5412 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
5413 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
5415 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
5421 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
5422 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
5423 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
5424 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
5427 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5428 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5430 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
5431 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
5432 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
5433 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
5434 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
5435 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
5436 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5437 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5438 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5440 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5441 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5444 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5448 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5449 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5450 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5451 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5452 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5453 these image-relative references:
5455 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5456 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5457 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5461 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5462 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5464 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5465 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5466 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5467 become apparent in next paragraph.
5469 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5472 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5473 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5474 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5475 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5477 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5479 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5480 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5481 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5482 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5483 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5484 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5485 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5486 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5487 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5488 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5489 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5492 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5493 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5494 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5495 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5496 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5497 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5498 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5499 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5500 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5501 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5502 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5503 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5504 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5505 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5506 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5507 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5508 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5509 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5510 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5511 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5512 no, no trace of failure is left.
5514 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5515 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5516 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5517 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5518 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5519 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5520 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5521 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5522 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5523 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5524 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5525 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5526 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5527 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5528 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5529 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5530 terminating the application.
5532 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5533 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5534 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5535 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5536 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5541 \c extern MessageBoxA
5547 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5549 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5550 \c ; for exception handler
5556 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5559 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5560 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5562 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5563 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5564 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5565 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5566 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5567 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5568 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5569 \c section .drectve info
5570 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5572 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5573 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5574 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5575 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5576 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5577 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5578 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5579 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5580 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5581 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5582 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5583 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5584 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5585 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5587 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5588 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5589 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5590 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5591 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5592 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5593 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5594 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5595 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5596 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5597 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5598 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5599 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5600 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5601 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5604 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5605 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5608 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5611 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5612 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5613 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5616 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5617 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5618 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5619 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5620 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5623 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5624 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5625 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5626 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5627 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5629 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5630 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5632 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5633 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5635 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5636 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5637 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5638 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5640 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5642 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5643 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5644 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5645 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5646 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5649 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5650 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5653 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5655 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5656 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5658 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5660 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5661 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5662 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5664 \H{machofmt} \I{Mach-O}\i\c{macho32} and \i\c{macho64}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5666 The \c{macho32} and \c{macho64} output formts produces \c{Mach-O}
5667 object files suitable for linking with the \i{MacOS X} linker.
5668 \i\c{macho} is a synonym for \c{macho32}.
5670 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5672 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf32}, \i\c{elf64}, \i\c{elfx32}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5673 Format} Object Files
5675 The \c{elf32}, \c{elf64} and \c{elfx32} output formats generate
5676 \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as
5677 used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V}, including \i{Solaris x86},
5678 \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf} provides a default output
5679 file-name extension of \c{.o}. \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5681 The \c{elfx32} format is used for the \i{x32} ABI, which is a 32-bit
5682 ABI with the CPU in 64-bit mode.
5684 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5686 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5687 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5688 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5689 most systems which support ELF.
5691 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5692 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5694 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5695 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5696 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5697 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5698 names}, but may still be
5699 overridden by these qualifiers.
5701 The available qualifiers are:
5703 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5704 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5705 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5707 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5708 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5711 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5712 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5715 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5716 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5717 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5718 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5720 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5721 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5722 requirements of the section.
5724 \b \i\c{tls} defines the section to be one which contains
5725 thread local variables.
5727 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5730 \I\c{.text} \I\c{.rodata} \I\c{.lrodata} \I\c{.data} \I\c{.ldata}
5731 \I\c{.bss} \I\c{.lbss} \I\c{.tdata} \I\c{.tbss} \I\c\{.comment}
5733 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5734 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5735 \c section .lrodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5736 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5737 \c section .ldata progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5738 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5739 \c section .lbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5740 \c section .tdata progbits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5741 \c section .tbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5742 \c section .comment progbits noalloc noexec nowrite align=1
5743 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5745 (Any section name other than those in the above table
5746 is treated by default like \c{other} in the above table.
5747 Please note that section names are case sensitive.)
5750 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5751 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5753 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5754 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5755 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5756 be able to generate a variety of ELF specific relocation types in ELF
5757 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5759 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5760 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5761 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5762 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5765 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5766 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5767 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5768 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5770 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5771 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5772 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5773 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5774 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5775 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5777 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5778 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5779 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5780 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5782 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5783 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5784 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5785 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5786 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5787 address of the symbol.
5789 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5790 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5791 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5792 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5793 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5794 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5797 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5798 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5799 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5800 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5801 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5802 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5804 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5805 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5807 \S{elftls} \i{Thread Local Storage}\I{TLS}: \c{elf} Special
5808 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5810 \b In ELF32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5811 \c{wrt ..tlsie} \I\c{..tlsie}
5812 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5813 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5814 of the symbol with code such as:
5816 \c mov eax,[tid wrt ..tlsie]
5820 \b In ELF64 or ELFx32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5821 \c{wrt ..gottpoff} \I\c{..gottpoff}
5822 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5823 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5824 of the symbol with code such as:
5826 \c mov rax,[rel tid wrt ..gottpoff]
5830 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5831 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5833 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5834 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5835 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5836 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5837 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5838 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5839 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5840 to specify these features.
5842 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5843 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5844 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5845 \c{data}.) For example:
5847 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5849 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5850 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5852 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5853 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5854 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5855 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5857 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5859 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5860 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5861 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5863 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5866 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5869 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5870 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5872 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5873 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5877 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5878 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5880 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5881 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5882 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5883 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5884 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5885 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5887 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5889 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5890 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5893 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5894 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5896 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5897 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5898 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5899 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5900 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5901 these relocations is generated.
5903 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5904 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5906 ELF provides debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5907 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5908 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5910 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5912 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5913 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5914 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5915 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5916 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5917 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5918 implementation does not.
5920 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5922 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5923 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5924 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5925 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5928 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5929 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5931 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5932 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5933 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5934 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5935 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5936 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5937 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5939 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5941 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5942 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5943 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5944 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5945 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5947 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5948 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5952 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5954 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5955 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5956 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5957 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5960 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5961 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5963 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5964 of view). It supports no special directives, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT},
5965 and no extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5966 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}. The
5967 only special symbol supported is \c{..start}.
5970 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5973 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5974 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5975 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5976 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5978 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5979 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5980 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5981 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5983 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5984 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5985 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5986 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5987 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5989 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5990 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5993 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5995 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5996 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5997 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5998 which is the name of the module:
6000 \c library mylib.rdl
6003 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
6005 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
6006 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
6007 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
6012 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
6013 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
6014 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
6016 \c module $kernel.core
6019 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
6022 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
6023 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
6024 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
6025 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
6026 is a procedure (function) or data object.
6028 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
6031 \c global sys_open:export
6033 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
6034 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
6036 \c global sys_open:export proc
6038 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
6039 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
6041 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
6044 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} Directive\I{EXTERN,
6047 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
6048 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
6049 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
6050 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
6051 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
6052 (function) or data object. For example:
6055 \c extern _open:import
6056 \c extern _printf:import proc
6057 \c extern _errno:import data
6059 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
6060 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
6063 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
6065 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
6066 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
6067 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{output/outform.h} or on the
6068 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
6070 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
6071 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
6072 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
6073 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
6074 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
6075 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
6076 and in what order they happen.
6078 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
6080 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
6082 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
6083 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
6084 different object format, because each object format defines its own
6085 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
6086 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
6087 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
6088 native object format selected:
6090 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
6091 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
6093 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
6094 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
6095 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
6096 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
6097 the final diagnostic output.
6099 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
6100 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
6101 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
6102 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
6103 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
6104 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
6105 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
6107 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
6108 them all to its output file.
6111 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
6113 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
6114 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
6115 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
6116 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
6117 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
6120 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
6122 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
6123 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
6124 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
6125 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
6126 support the \c{.COM} format.
6128 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
6129 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
6130 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
6131 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
6132 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
6133 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
6134 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
6136 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
6140 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
6142 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
6143 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
6145 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
6146 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
6147 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
6148 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
6149 An LZH archiver can be found at
6150 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
6151 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
6152 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
6153 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
6154 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
6155 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
6156 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
6157 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
6159 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
6160 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
6161 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
6162 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
6163 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
6164 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
6165 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
6167 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
6168 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
6169 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
6170 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
6171 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
6172 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
6183 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
6184 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
6185 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
6186 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
6187 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
6188 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
6191 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
6192 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
6193 into the resulting executable file.
6199 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
6200 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
6201 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
6202 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
6207 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
6211 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
6213 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
6215 \c segment stack stack
6219 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
6220 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
6221 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
6222 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
6223 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
6224 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
6227 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
6228 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
6229 world' and then exit.
6232 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
6234 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
6235 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
6236 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
6237 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
6238 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
6241 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6242 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
6243 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
6245 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
6246 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
6247 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
6248 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
6249 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
6250 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
6251 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
6252 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
6253 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
6255 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
6256 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
6257 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
6258 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
6259 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
6260 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
6261 explicitly issue one of your own.
6263 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
6264 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
6265 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
6266 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
6268 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
6269 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
6270 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
6271 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
6274 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
6275 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
6279 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
6281 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
6282 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
6283 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
6287 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6289 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
6290 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
6291 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
6292 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
6300 \c ; put your code here
6304 \c ; put data items here
6308 \c ; put uninitialized data here
6310 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
6311 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
6312 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
6315 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
6316 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
6317 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
6318 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
6319 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
6322 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
6324 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
6326 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
6327 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
6328 and give the desired file name.
6331 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6333 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
6334 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
6335 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
6336 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
6337 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
6338 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
6341 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
6343 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
6344 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
6345 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
6346 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
6347 adjust address references within the file when generating the
6348 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
6349 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
6350 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
6351 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
6353 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
6355 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
6356 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
6357 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
6358 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
6361 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
6363 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
6364 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
6365 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
6366 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
6367 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
6368 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
6371 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
6372 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
6373 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
6374 though it is not actually code.
6376 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
6377 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
6378 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
6379 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
6382 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
6384 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
6385 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
6386 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
6387 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
6390 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
6392 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
6393 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6394 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6395 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
6396 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
6397 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
6398 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
6399 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
6401 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
6402 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
6418 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
6419 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
6421 If you then declare an external like this:
6425 then the macro will expand it as
6428 \c %define printf _printf
6430 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
6431 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
6433 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
6434 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
6435 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
6437 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
6439 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
6441 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
6442 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
6443 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
6446 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
6447 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
6448 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
6449 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
6450 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
6451 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
6452 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
6453 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
6454 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
6455 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
6457 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
6458 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
6459 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
6460 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
6461 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
6462 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
6463 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
6465 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
6466 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
6467 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
6468 segment part of the full data item address).
6470 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
6471 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
6472 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
6473 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
6474 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
6475 pointers you are passed.
6477 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6478 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6479 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6480 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6481 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6483 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6484 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6485 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6486 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6487 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6488 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6489 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6490 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6491 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6492 variables in this latter case.
6494 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6495 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6496 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6497 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6501 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6503 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6504 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6505 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6506 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6508 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6509 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6510 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6512 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6513 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6516 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6517 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6518 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6519 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6520 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6521 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6522 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6523 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6525 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6526 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6527 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6528 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6529 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6530 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6531 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6532 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6533 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6534 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6535 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6536 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6537 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6540 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6541 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6542 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6544 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6545 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6546 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6547 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6549 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6550 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6551 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6554 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6555 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6556 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6557 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6558 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6559 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6560 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6563 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6564 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6565 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6566 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6567 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6568 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6569 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6570 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6571 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6572 sequence points without performance suffering.
6574 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6575 The following example is for small model:
6582 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6583 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6587 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6591 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6592 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6593 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6594 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6595 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6596 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6598 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6599 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6603 \c ; and then, further down...
6605 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6606 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6608 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6610 \c ; then those data items...
6615 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6617 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6620 \c int myint = 1234;
6621 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6623 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6624 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6625 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6628 \c push word [myint]
6629 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6630 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6634 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6635 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6636 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6637 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6638 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6639 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6640 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6641 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6642 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6643 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6647 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6649 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6650 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6651 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6652 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6653 accessed from assembler as
6659 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6660 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6661 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6667 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6668 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6669 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6670 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6671 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6672 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6673 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6674 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6676 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6677 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6678 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6679 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6680 one offset and using just that.
6682 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6683 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6684 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6685 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6686 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6693 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6694 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6695 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6696 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6697 out how your own compiler does it.
6700 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6702 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6703 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6704 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6705 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6706 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6708 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6709 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6711 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6718 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6719 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6724 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6725 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6726 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6728 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6729 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6730 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6731 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6732 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6733 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6734 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6736 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6737 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6738 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6739 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6740 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6741 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6742 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6744 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6745 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6746 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6748 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6756 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6757 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6758 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6763 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6764 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6765 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6768 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6770 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6771 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6773 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6774 not required for Pascal.
6776 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6777 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6778 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6779 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6780 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6781 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6782 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6783 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6784 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6785 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6786 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6787 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6789 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6791 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6793 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6794 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6795 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6798 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6800 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6801 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6802 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6803 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6806 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6807 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6808 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6810 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6811 control to the callee.
6813 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6814 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6815 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6816 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6817 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6818 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6819 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6820 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6822 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6823 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6824 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6825 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6826 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6827 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6828 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6830 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6831 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6832 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6834 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6835 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6836 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6837 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6838 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6839 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6840 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6841 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6842 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6843 \c{RETF} instruction.
6845 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6846 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6847 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6848 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6849 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6850 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6853 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6854 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6857 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6858 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6864 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6865 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6866 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6870 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6872 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6874 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6875 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6879 \c ; and then, further down...
6881 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6882 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6883 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6884 \c call far SomeFunc
6886 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6888 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6889 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6892 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6895 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6896 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6897 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6898 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6899 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6902 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6903 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6905 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6906 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6908 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6909 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6911 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6912 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6915 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6917 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6918 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6919 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6920 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6921 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6922 generated with an operand.
6924 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6925 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6926 reverse order. For example:
6934 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6935 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6936 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6941 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6942 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6943 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6944 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6945 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6946 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6950 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6952 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6953 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6954 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6955 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6956 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6959 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6960 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6961 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6962 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6963 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6964 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6965 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6966 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6967 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6968 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6969 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6970 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6974 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6976 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6977 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6978 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6981 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6983 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6984 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6985 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6986 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6987 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6988 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6990 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6991 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6992 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6993 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6994 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6996 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6998 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
7000 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
7001 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
7002 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
7003 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
7005 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
7006 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
7007 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
7009 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
7010 control to the callee.
7012 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
7013 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
7014 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
7015 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
7016 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
7017 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
7018 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
7019 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
7021 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
7022 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
7023 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
7024 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
7025 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
7026 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
7027 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
7028 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
7029 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
7030 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
7031 and type of the remaining ones.
7033 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
7034 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
7035 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
7037 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
7038 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
7039 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
7042 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
7043 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
7044 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
7046 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
7047 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
7048 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
7049 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
7050 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
7051 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
7052 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
7055 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
7056 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
7057 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
7058 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
7059 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
7060 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
7061 still pushed in right-to-left order.
7063 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
7070 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
7071 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
7075 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
7078 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
7079 assembly code, you would do something like this:
7083 \c ; and then, further down...
7085 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
7086 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
7088 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
7090 \c ; then those data items...
7095 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
7097 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
7099 \c int myint = 1234;
7100 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
7103 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
7105 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
7106 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
7107 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
7108 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
7109 accessed from assembler as
7114 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
7115 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
7116 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
7121 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
7122 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
7123 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
7124 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
7125 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
7126 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
7127 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
7128 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
7129 are also 4 bytes long.
7131 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
7132 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
7133 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
7134 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
7135 one offset and using just that.
7137 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
7138 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
7139 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
7140 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
7141 Typically, you might find that a structure like
7148 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
7149 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
7150 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
7151 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
7152 out how your own compiler does it.
7155 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
7157 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
7158 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
7159 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
7160 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
7161 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
7163 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
7170 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
7171 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
7176 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
7177 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
7178 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
7180 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
7181 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
7182 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
7183 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
7184 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
7185 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
7186 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
7188 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
7189 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
7190 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
7193 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
7196 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
7197 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
7198 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
7199 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
7200 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
7202 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
7203 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
7204 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
7205 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
7207 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
7208 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
7209 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
7210 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
7212 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
7215 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
7217 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
7218 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
7219 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
7220 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
7221 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
7222 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
7223 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
7225 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
7226 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
7227 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
7228 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
7229 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
7230 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
7233 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
7235 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
7238 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
7239 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
7241 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
7242 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
7243 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
7252 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
7254 \c ; the function body comes here
7261 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
7262 second leading underscore.)
7264 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
7265 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
7266 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
7267 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
7268 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
7270 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
7271 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
7272 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
7273 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
7274 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
7275 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
7276 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
7277 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
7278 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
7279 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
7280 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
7281 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
7282 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
7283 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
7284 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
7285 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
7287 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
7288 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
7289 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
7296 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
7300 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
7302 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
7303 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
7304 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
7305 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
7306 way this works is like this:
7308 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
7310 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
7311 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
7312 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
7313 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
7315 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
7316 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
7317 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
7318 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
7319 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
7320 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
7322 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
7323 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
7324 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
7327 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
7329 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
7330 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
7331 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
7332 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
7333 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
7334 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
7335 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
7336 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
7337 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
7340 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
7342 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
7343 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
7344 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
7345 has every necessary entry present.
7347 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
7350 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
7352 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
7353 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
7354 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
7355 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
7356 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
7357 items away from the library's data section in which they were
7360 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
7362 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
7368 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
7370 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
7375 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
7376 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
7377 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
7378 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
7379 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
7380 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
7381 effectively, it has become).
7383 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
7384 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
7387 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
7389 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
7390 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
7391 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
7392 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
7393 which resides elsewhere.
7395 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
7397 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
7399 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
7400 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
7401 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
7403 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
7404 functions by means of
7406 \c funcptr: dd my_function
7408 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
7410 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt ..sym
7412 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
7413 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
7414 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
7417 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
7419 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
7420 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
7421 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
7422 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
7423 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
7424 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
7425 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
7428 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
7429 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
7430 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
7431 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
7435 \S{link} Generating the Library File
7437 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
7438 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
7440 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
7441 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
7443 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
7444 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
7445 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
7446 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
7448 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
7450 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
7451 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
7454 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
7456 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
7457 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
7458 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
7459 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
7460 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
7461 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
7464 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
7466 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
7467 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
7468 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
7469 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
7470 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
7471 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
7472 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
7473 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
7475 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
7476 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7477 segment, so just coding, for example,
7479 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7481 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7482 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7485 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7486 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7487 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7488 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7490 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7492 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7493 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7494 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7495 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7496 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7497 segment to a 32-bit one.
7499 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7500 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7502 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7504 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7505 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7506 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7509 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7510 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7512 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7513 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7514 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7515 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7516 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7518 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7519 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7520 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7521 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7523 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7524 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7525 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7527 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7528 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7530 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7531 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7532 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7533 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7534 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7536 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7537 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7539 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7541 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7542 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7543 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7545 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7547 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7548 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7549 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7550 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7552 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7554 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7557 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7558 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7560 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7562 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7563 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7564 offset), and calls that address.
7567 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7569 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7570 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7571 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7572 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7573 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7575 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7576 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7577 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7578 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7582 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7583 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7584 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7585 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7587 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7588 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7589 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7590 instructions with implicit addressing:
7591 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7592 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7593 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7594 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7595 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7596 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7598 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7599 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7600 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7601 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7602 size from the code segment.
7604 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7605 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7606 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7607 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7608 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7609 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7614 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7615 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7618 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7619 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7622 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7624 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7625 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7626 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7627 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7629 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7630 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7631 registers, which still add their bases.
7633 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7634 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7635 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7636 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7637 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7639 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7640 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7641 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7642 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7643 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7645 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7646 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7647 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7648 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7650 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7651 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7652 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7655 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7657 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7658 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7660 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7661 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7662 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7663 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7665 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7666 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7667 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7668 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7669 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7670 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7671 can be used for this purpose.
7673 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7675 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7676 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7677 immediates to 32 bits.
7679 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7683 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7684 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7685 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7686 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7687 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7689 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7690 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7691 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7692 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7694 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7696 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7697 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7698 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7699 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7700 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7701 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7705 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7706 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7707 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7711 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7712 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7713 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7714 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7716 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7717 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7719 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7721 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7723 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}
7725 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7726 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7728 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7729 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7730 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7731 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7732 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7734 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7736 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7737 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7738 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7739 stack, and returned in \c{ST0} and \c{ST1}.
7741 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7743 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7745 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7747 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7749 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7751 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7753 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7755 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}
7757 What follows is a simplified summary.
7759 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7760 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7761 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7762 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7763 use by the function without saving.
7765 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7767 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7768 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7769 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7771 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7773 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7775 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7777 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7779 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7781 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7782 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7783 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7784 that isn't listed here.
7787 \H{problems} Common Problems
7789 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7791 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7792 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7793 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7794 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7795 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7796 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7797 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7798 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7799 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7802 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7804 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7805 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7806 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7809 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7810 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7811 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7812 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7813 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7814 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7815 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7816 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7817 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7818 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7819 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7820 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7823 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7825 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7826 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7827 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7828 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7832 \c ; some boot sector code
7837 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7838 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7839 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7843 \c ; some boot sector code
7845 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7848 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7849 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7850 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7851 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7852 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7853 find out what's wrong with it.
7856 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7858 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7863 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7864 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7867 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7868 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7869 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7870 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7871 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7872 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7873 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7874 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7875 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7876 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7878 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7881 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7883 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7884 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7885 problem and generate sensible code.
7888 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7890 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7891 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7892 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7894 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
7895 (click on "Bug Tracker"), or if that fails then through one of the
7896 contacts in \k{contact}.
7898 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7899 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7900 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7901 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7902 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7903 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7906 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7909 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7910 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7912 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7913 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7914 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7915 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7916 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7917 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7920 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7921 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7922 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7924 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7925 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7926 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7927 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7928 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7929 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7930 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7931 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7933 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7934 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7935 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7936 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7937 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7938 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7939 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7940 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7941 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7942 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7943 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7944 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7945 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7947 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7948 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7949 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7950 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7951 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7952 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7953 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7954 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7955 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7956 should be 77 instead'.
7958 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7959 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7960 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7961 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7962 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7963 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7964 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7967 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7968 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7969 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7970 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7971 differently from us.
7974 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7976 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7978 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7981 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7982 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7983 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7984 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7985 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7987 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7988 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7989 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7990 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7994 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7996 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7997 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7998 are on a Unix system.
8001 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
8003 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
8005 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
8007 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
8008 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
8009 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
8010 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
8012 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
8013 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
8014 summary of command line options.
8017 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
8019 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
8020 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
8021 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
8022 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
8025 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
8026 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
8027 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
8028 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
8029 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
8031 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
8033 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
8038 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
8040 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
8041 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
8042 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
8043 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
8044 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
8045 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
8046 Then it will reach the code section.
8048 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
8049 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
8050 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
8051 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
8052 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
8053 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
8054 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
8057 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
8058 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
8059 only handle 2147483647 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
8060 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
8061 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
8062 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
8063 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
8064 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
8065 the instructions in your code section.
8067 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
8068 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
8069 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
8072 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
8076 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
8078 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
8079 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
8082 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
8085 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
8086 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
8087 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
8088 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
8089 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
8090 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
8093 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
8094 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
8095 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
8096 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
8098 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
8099 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
8100 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
8101 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
8102 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
8103 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
8104 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
8106 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
8107 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
8108 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
8109 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
8110 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
8112 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
8113 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
8114 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
8115 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
8116 you may still have to place some manually.
8118 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
8119 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
8120 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
8123 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
8124 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
8125 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
8126 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
8127 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
8128 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
8129 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
8130 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
8131 suppress disassembly of the data area.
8134 \S{ndisother} Other Options
8136 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
8137 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
8138 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
8139 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
8141 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
8142 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
8143 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
8144 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
8145 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
8149 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
8151 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
8152 possible, should be sent to
8153 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
8155 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
8156 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
8157 new features as well.
8159 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
8161 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
8163 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
8164 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
8165 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
8166 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
8170 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}